Yamaha RX-A3080 de handleiding
- Categorie
- Auto media-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
EN
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Introduction 5
Accessories................................................................................... 5
About this book ............................................................................ 5
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
FEATURES 7
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7
AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12
AV SETUP GUIDE........................................................................................................................................... 12
MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12
Part names and functions .............................................................13
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18
PREPARATIONS 19
General setup procedure ..............................................................19
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................42
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 42
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 44
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 45
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 47
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 48
3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................49
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) .................................49
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only).....................................50
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....51
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................51
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................51
5 Connecting other devices............................................................52
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................52
6 Connecting the power cable........................................................52
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................53
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................54
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................55
Multi Measure................................................................................................................................................57
Angle/Height Measure ..................................................................................................................................58
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................58
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................61
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................64
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments .................................................................................................64
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................65
Warning messages........................................................................................................................................66
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................67
Connecting with a wireless router (access point) .......................................................................................67
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................68
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................73
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................73
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................73
PLAYBACK 74
Basic playback procedure.............................................................74
Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................74
En 3
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................75
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................76
Playing back with surround effects optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI).......................................... 77
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD
3
) ............................................................................. 77
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 81
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 82
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 82
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models) ....................................................83
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 83
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................ 84
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 84
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................86
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 87
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 87
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 88
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 89
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ...........................................................................90
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................92
Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................ 92
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 95
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................96
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 96
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................97
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 97
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 98
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 101
Media sharing setup................................................................................................................................... 101
Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................. 102
Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 105
Playback of Internet radio ......................................................................................................................... 105
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................107
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 108
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................108
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 110
Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................110
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................111
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4...........................................................................................................114
Registering favorite items (shortcut)........................................... 116
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................116
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................116
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 117
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................117
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................118
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 119
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................119
CONFIGURATIONS 125
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 125
Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................126
Speaker .......................................................................................................................................................131
Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................136
Scene ...........................................................................................................................................................142
Video/HDMI .................................................................................................................................................143
Network.......................................................................................................................................................146
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................149
Multi Zone ...................................................................................................................................................150
System.........................................................................................................................................................152
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 158
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ..................................................................................................................159
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ......................................................................159
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) ................................................................159
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) ...........................................................................................159
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP).........................................................160
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)...........................................................................................160
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) .......................................................160
En 4
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 161
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 161
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)........................................................................ 161
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 162
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 162
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 162
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 163
Updating the unit’s firmware .................................................................................................................... 163
APPENDIX 164
Additional Features.................................................................... 164
Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled speakers/headphones................................. 164
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)......................................................... 166
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 167
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 168
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 168
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 168
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 170
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 172
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)................................................................................................................ 173
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only).............................................. 173
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 174
USB and network ....................................................................................................................................... 175
Error indications on the front display ..........................................177
Glossary .................................................................................... 178
Audio information (audio decoding format) ............................................................................................ 178
Audio Information (Others) ....................................................................................................................... 180
HDMI and video information ..................................................................................................................... 180
Network information ................................................................................................................................. 181
Yamaha technologies................................................................................................................................. 181
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 182
Supported devices ..................................................................................................................................... 182
File formats................................................................................................................................................. 182
Video signal flow........................................................................ 183
Video conversion table .............................................................................................................................. 183
Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 184
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 184
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................184
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................186
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................186
Trademarks............................................................................... 187
Specifications............................................................................ 188
En 5
Introduction
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
#
AM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
#
FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
#
DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
#
YPAO microphone
#
Microphone base
Pole
#
Power cable
#
Remote control
#
Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x2)
#
Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
About this book
The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3080 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
En 6
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
En 7
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.42)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.78)
By processing front left and front right sound fields
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
dynamic sound effects.
Providing a realistic feel and
surround effect optimized for the
scene of the content
(SURROUND:AI) (p.77)
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes the scene of the
content and creates the optimal surround effect for it.
This AI instantaneously analyzes scenes by focusing on
sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background music”,
“ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as optimizes
the surround effect in real time.
This creates a compelling sense of realism with expressive
power beyond conventional sound field effects.
Various wireless connection
methods (p.67)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection.
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.73)
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Low power consumption (p.157)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
power consumption.
Backlit remote control (p.18)
This unit’s backlit remote control provides excellent
visibility, making it easy to use, even in a dark room.
Additional Features (p.164)
This unit is equipped with a function for connecting speakers
wirelessly. Content being played back by this unit can be
sent to a Bluetooth device (speakers, headphones, etc.)
(p.164).
In addition, if a device that supports the MusicCast Surround
function is used, the surround speakers and subwoofer can
also be wireless (p.166).
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from external
device
En 8
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD
3
“CINEMA DSP HD
3
” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD
3
Level
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En 9
YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C.
In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing
of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the
acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so
that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
YPAO 3D measurement
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence
speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to
maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
Compensation
Time
Level
YPAO Volume OFF
YPAO Volume ON
FrequencyLow High
Level
High
En 10
Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.
High-resolution music enhancer
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz
content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the
musicality in the original content (p.122).
Before processing
After processing
High-quality video processing
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as
a high-quality image (p.143).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
Frequency
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
En 11
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp
expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).
The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3080 only)
By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an
11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.110) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the
speakers of a different room.
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.
External power amp
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
En 12
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
X
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google
Play.
AV SETUP GUIDE
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with
cable connections between AV receiver and source devices
as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you
through the various settings such as speaker connections,
TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the
speaker system.
Functions
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance
with illustrations)
• Viewing owner’s manual
X
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google
Play.
MusicCast CONTROLLER
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” is an application that allows you
to link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
MusicCast compatible devices.
Functions
• Selecting and playing back various content
– Play back music from your mobile device
– Select an Internet radio station
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 13
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the main zone.
Y
Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 can be turned on/off individually (p.114).
b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.145)
• HDMI Standby Through is enabled (p.145)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.147)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.150)
c AI indicator
Lights up when the SURROUND:AI is enabled (p.77)
d Front display
Displays information (p.15).
e Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
f PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.82).
g INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
h Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
i VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Opening the front panel door
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
ENTER
OPTION
SETUP
HELPRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
AI
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
5V
1A
SCENE
1234
RL AUDIO
INFO
(
WPS
)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
(
CONNECT
)
e fb cda
g
i
h
En 14
■ Inside of the front panel door
a SETUP key
Displays the Setup menu on the TV.
b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.119).
d HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
e AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.81).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.73).
g PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.76).
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.75).
i MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.114).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.114).
j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.117).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.69).
k MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.84, p.88,
p.93).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.116).
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.84).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.87, p.84).
m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.88, p.93) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio
station (p.85) (other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.116).
n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.84).
o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.97).
p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.55).
q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
r AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.48).
ENTER
OPTION
SETUP
HELPRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
AI
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
MULTI ZONE
AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
5V
1A
SCENE
1234
RL AUDIO
INFO
(
WPS
)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
(
CONNECT
)
dg lnacef jkmbhi
op q r
(U.S.A. model)
En 15
Front display (indicators)
a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2/OUT3
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.157).
c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.163)
d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
e ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.114).
f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or an
FM/AM radio station signal (other models).
g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.115).
h Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.117).
i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.121) is working.
l Wireless LAN indicator
Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network (p.67).
Y
This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the MusicCast
network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network”
(p.73).
m Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.96).
n Hi-Res
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.122) is working.
o CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.77) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD
3
is activated.
p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) is working.
q SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
r Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
s VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.77), or the virtual surround
processing (p.80) is working.
t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
M Rear presence speaker (L)
< Rear presence speaker (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)
u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.120).
OUT
21
IN
A-DRC
VOL.
VIRTUAL
YPAO VOL.
3
ZONE
ECO
2
SBL SBR
SL SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
ENHANCER
SLEEP
STEREO TUNED
PARTY
MUTE
HD
ZONE ZONE
43
SW1 SW2
RPL RPR
Hi
-
Res
LINK MASTER
3
fe
j
ki
ol r utrqp
a
h
gbc
d
sm n
En 16
Rear panel
(RX-A3080 U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2 3
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
AC IN
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
5
6
L R R RL L
R L
L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
a e j kf ni lbb hgc md
qo rp
En 17
a PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.47).
b Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.67) and a Bluetooth connection (p.96).
c AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.47).
AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.47).
d AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).
e HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.42). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
f COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.46).
g HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).
h TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.52).
i REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.113).
j HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.112).
k NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.51).
l RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
m VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.52).
n AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.52).
o ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.49).
p ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3080)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).
ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2080)
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111).
q SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.20).
r PRE OUT jacks, PRE OUT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).
En 18
Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
b z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the zone selected with the MAIN/ZONE
switch.
c MAIN/ZONE switch
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.114).
d SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
e PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.115).
f SCENE keys
Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using the
SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.75).
g Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
Y
Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
h PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.84).
Recall USB, Bluetooth, or network content that is registered
as a shortcut (p.116).
i OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.119).
j SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.125)
k Menu operation keys
Operates the menu.
l HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
m Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.76).
n Playback operation keys
Controls playback of the external device.
o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.74).
p PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.82).
q External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or
“NET”is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
Y
The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI
Control-compatible devices cannot be used.
r AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).
s VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
t MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
c
b
d
e
h
q
f
i
l
j
g
m
a
n
q
k
q
q
s
q
t
q
o
p
r
(RX-A3080)
En 19
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.49)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.55)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.67)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.73)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En 20
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker
X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the left) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).
E
12
39
4
6
T Y
5
9
R
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
Speaker type Function
Front (L/R)
1 2
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
4 5
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
6 7
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
E R
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Rear presence (L/R)
TY
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
En 21
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
X
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
layout” (p.26).
7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]
(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.77).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.54).
• (RX-A3080 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.
E
9
R
12
39
45
6 7
T Y
En 22
5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the
surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for
enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup”
menu before performing YPAO (p.54).
7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back
speakers.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.54).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
E
9
R
12
39
45
T Y
21
39
45
9
67
ER
En 23
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.54).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
En 24
5.1 system
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.54).
45
12
39
En 25
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.54).
2.1 system
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
1
2
39
ER
En 26
Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening
environment (p.133).
X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD
3
with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately (p.133).
Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Y
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and
listening position
En 27
When using four presence speakers
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)
speakers
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Caution
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
SPEAKER¡IMP.
En 28
■ Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts
(rear panel and screws).
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker cables short circuit.
Speakers to be connected
If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
speakers (*2).
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).
X
• When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using only
one surround back speaker was discontinued.
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.134) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
Speaker type
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
7.2.2/5.2.4 7.1/5.1.2 5.1 2.1
Front (L/R) 1 2 ((((
Center 3 (((
Surround (L/R) 4 5 (()*5
Surround back (L/R) 6 7 )*1 )*3
Front presence (L/R) E R ()*4 )*6
Rear presence (L/R) T Y )*2
Subwoofer 9 ((((
–
+
–
+
En 29
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
2
Loosen the speaker terminal.
3
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
1
Tighten the speaker terminal.
2
Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L
R L
L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
12
3
45
99
T
6 7
Y
ER
The unit
(rear)
FRONT
+
11
2
2
4
4
33
+ (red)
– (black)
FRONT
+
11
22
Banana plug
(
FRONT
)
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
SUR. BACKSURRUND
1
2
SURROUND BACK
Audio pin cable
En 30
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Bi-amp
connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
External power
amplifier
Main zone
Zone2/3
Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration
En 31
■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-A3080)
(RX-A2080)
Y
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.54).
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA
SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.
Main zone
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.131)
Page
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
External
speakers
External power
amplifier
(required)
7 Surround back +1 room 7.2 +1Zone 32
9
Surround back
Front presence
+1 room 7.2.2 +1Zone 32
7 Surround back +2 rooms 7.2 +2Zone 33
11
Surround back
Front presence
Rear presence 7.2.4 [ext.RP] 33
11
Surround back
Front presence
Rear presence
Front 7.2.4 [ext.Front] 34
11 Surround back
Front presence
Rear presence
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] 34
9
Surround back
Front presence
Front +1 room
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
7 Surround back Front +2 rooms
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
35
7 ) Surround back 7.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Front presence 5.2.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Surround back +1 room 7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone 37
11 ) Surround back
Front presence
Rear presence
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
37
9 ) Front presence Rear presence
5.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.RP]
38
Main zone
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.131)
Page
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
External
speakers
External power
amplifier
(required)
7 Surround back +1 room 7.2 +1Zone 32
9
Surround back
Front presence
+1 room 7.2.2 +1Zone 32
7 Surround back +2 rooms 7.2 +2Zone 33
9
Surround back
Front presence
Front +1 room
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
7 Surround back Front +2 rooms
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
35
7 ) Surround back 7.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Front presence 5.2.2 Bi-Amp 36
7 ) Surround back +1 room 7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone 37
En 32
7.2 +1Zone 7.2.2 +1Zone
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1
21
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
Main zone
Zone2
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER EXTRA SP 1
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 2
21
1
E
2
3
4
6
99
7
5
R
Main zone
Zone2
En 33
7.2 +2Zone
X
When Zone3 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
12
12
Zone2
Zone3
Main zone
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER EXTRA SP 1
TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
6 7
YT
via
external amp
via
external amp
En 34
7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3080 only)
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER EXTRA SP 1
TY EXTRA SP 2
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
6 7
YT
via external amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
6 7
YT
via external amp
via external amp
via
external amp
via
external amp
En 35
7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone 7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER EXTRA SP 1
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 2
21
1
E
2
3
4
6
99
7
5
R
via external amp
Main zone
Zone2
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
12
12
Zone2
Zone3
Main zone
via external amp
En 36
7.2 Bi-Amp 5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
67
Bi-amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER EXTRA SP 2
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
Bi-amp
En 37
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
TY (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 2
21
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
Bi-amp
Main zone
Zone2
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
6 7
YT
Bi-amp
via external amp
via external amp
via
external amp
via
external amp
En 38
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER EXTRA SP 2
TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9 SUBWOOFER 1-2
1
3
45
99
2
ER
YT
via
external amp
via
external amp
Bi-amp
En 39
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).
X
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers
When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).
X
• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131)
in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.111).
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
R.PRESENCE
R R RL L L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
12
3
9
45
9
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R L R R RL L L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
EXTRA SP2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
1
4
6
2
5
7
3
12
12
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2 or Zone3
Zone2 or Zone3
En 40
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
a ZONE2/F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).
b ZONE3/R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).
c FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds.
f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
g FRONT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output front channel sounds through XLR balanced cables.
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2 3
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(5 STB) (6 GAME)
COAXIAL
AC IN
FM
ANTENNA
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
5
6
L R R RL L
R L
L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
cba def g
The unit (rear)
3
HDMI
B)
(6 GAME)
2
AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
UT
3/
NCE
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
ROUND
R.PRESENCE
L R R RL L
R L
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
PR
PR
ONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
MAIN IN
PR
SU
R
FRONT
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
Main input jack
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
En 41
Making balanced connections
Use XLR balanced cables to connect a power amplifier to the FRONT (XLR) jacks on the unit.
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• Hi-Fi amplifier equipped with XLR jacks (to enjoy a 2-channel stereo system with a balanced
connection)
• Multichannel amplifier equipped with unbalanced inputs (to enjoy multichannel CINEMA
DSP)
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
3
HDMI
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
1
2
RE OUT
ZONE 3/
PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
R L
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
PR
P
B
PR
P
B
O
MPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
XLR
XLR
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
(Female connector)
Power amplifier
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
Speaker
connections
The unit (rear)
En 42
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.97).
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
jacks.
HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using as
short a cable as possible to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
HDMI cable
Y
P
R
P
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
Component video cable
AV 1
VIDEO
(1 MOVIE)
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO3
Stereo pin cable
En 43
XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
Y
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the
connector and then pull it out.
About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
AUDIO 4
R
XLR balanced cable (male)
CENTER
PRE OUT
XLR balanced cable (female)
2. HOT 1. GND
3. COLD
XLR input jacks XLR output jacks
1. GND 2. HOT
3. COLD
En 44
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
cable).
Y
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.45).
X
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.184).
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)
(6
G
AV 1 AV 2
A
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SURROUND
R
5
6
L
AM
FRONT
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
B
(
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
HDMI
OPTICAL
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
ARC
12
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
OO
R
L L
R
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
En 45
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
If a second TV or projector is connected to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, you can use the remote control
to switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching video (p.74). In addition, a TV, etc.,
placed in Zone 2 can be connected to the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack on the unit (p.112).
Y
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 and 3 jack.
• You can connect a video monitor in Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 3 jack in order to enjoy video and audio.
The zone to be used can be selected with “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu.
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.
Y
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
(p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
X
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2 3
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
PHONO
VIDEO
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI HDMI
3
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
ARC
12
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
TV
HDMI input
HDMI OUT 3 jack
Zone 2/4
A
RC
1
3
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 3 AV 4
6 GAME)
N
A
O
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
6
L R RL L
R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
En 46
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio
output jacks available on your video device.
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.153) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5
AV
6
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
S
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
R
R
5
6
L R RL
ZONE 2/
Z
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTERFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
E
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
R
L
COAXIAL
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
B
P
RP
CC
The unit (rear)
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE O
U
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENC
E
R
5
6
AM
Y
Y
C
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
L
R
L
R
OO
C C
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
En 47
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
Y
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,
6) jacks to another input source.
• (RX-A3080 only)
Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its
XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.43).
X
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO with the input key on the remote control, the
sound played on the audio device will be output from this unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3080 only
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo (RCA)
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
Analog stereo (XLR) AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3080 only)
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB)
(6
G
AV 1 AV 2
A
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SURROUND
R
5
6
L
AM
FRONT
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
B
(
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
C C
L
R
L
R
O O
L
R
L
R
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
En 48
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
The AUX jacks are convenient for temporarily connecting an audio playback device.
Use stereo pin cables to connect an audio device (such as a CD player) to the unit.
For details on connecting a USB device to the USB jack, see “Connecting a USB storage device”
(p.97).
X
Before making connections, stop playback on the device, and turn down the volume of the unit sufficiently.
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on the device
will be output from the unit.
ENTER
HELPRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
5V
1A
RL AUDIO
RL
Audio device
The unit (front)
En 49
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
X
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN
R
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
5
6
L R RL L
R
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
En 50
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
IN
R
E
R
R
L
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(7 TV) (3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
VIDEO
GND
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
AUDIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
5
6
L R RL L
R
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
R
L
75ȍ
DAB/FM
(
4 RADIO
)
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
En 51
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.147).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.136) in the “Network” menu.
Y
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection and Bluetooth connection, stand the
wireless antenna up straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.67).
Y
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
3
AV 6
AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
R L
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
En 52
5 Connecting other devices
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug
cable.
X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.156) in the “Setup”
menu.
6 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America
models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
to an AC wall outlet.
3
D
MI
AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
R.PRESENCE
R RL L
R L
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONT
S
UR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
System
connector
jack
Yamaha
subwoofer
Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)
Trigger In
(+12V)
3
AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
E
RS
CENTER FRONT
N
CE
RL
R L
L R L
.
PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
FRONT
S
P2
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
RS-232C
GGER
O
UT
.
1A
T
AL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V-
240V
110V-
120V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
3
OUT
O
TE
AC IN
CENTER
FRONT
R
L
L R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
RS-232C
NETWORK
H
DMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(
HDCP2.2)
Z
ONE OUT)
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
En 53
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit.
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
SETUP
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 54
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30)
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press
ENTER.
6
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
• When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select
“Power Amp Assign” (p.131), then select your speaker system.
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Surround” !
“Layout” (p.133), then select “Front”.
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Front Presence” !
“Layout” (p.133), then select your front presence speaker layout.
If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout
in “Rear Presence”.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
SETUP
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 55
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
room.
X
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
for acoustic perfection.
Y
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit.
X
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
The following screen appears on the TV.
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
9
12
3
45
ER
YPAO MIC
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
z
En 56
5
If desired, select the measuring options.
Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Measure” (p.57) or
“Angle/Height Measure” (p.58) and press ENTER.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Measuring option” is set to “Multi Measure”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions” (p.61)
When “Measuring option” is not set to “Multi Measure”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.58)
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 57
Multi Measure
Selects multi measure or single measure.
Measuring method
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.
Checked
Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
Unchecked (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Single measure
En 58
Angle/Height Measure
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
Settings
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
Measure” box is unchecked. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
measurement.
Y
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
finishes.
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 3.
Checked
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.
Unchecked
(default)
Disables the angle/height measurement.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 59
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
2
Perform the angle/height measurement.
1
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
3
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
4
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
Microphone base
Pole
Microphone
base
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
En 60
5
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
3
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
After confirming the result, press RETURN to return to the
“Measurement Finished” screen.
X
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 61
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
Measure” box is checked. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8
listening positions.
Y
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
3
When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“Skip” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
following screen appears automatically.
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
Proceed to Step 5.
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 4.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 62
4
Perform the angle/height measurement.
1
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
position “1”.
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
3
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
4
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
5
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
Microphone base
Pole
Microphone
base
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
En 63
5
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
X
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).
6
To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 64
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measurement result” and press ENTER.
X
You can also select “YPAO Result” (p.135) from “Speaker” (p.131) in the “Setup”
menu, which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
a Measurement result items
b Measurement result details
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
X
“Angle (horizontal)” and “Height” show the results when angle/height
measurement is performed.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker” and then “YPAO
Result” (p.135).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
a
b
c
Angle
(horizontal)
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
Height
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 65
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform
YPAO again.
Error message Remedy
ERROR 1
Front speakers are not
detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.
ERROR 2
One of the surround speakers
cannot be detected.
ERROR 3
One of the front presence
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 4
One of the surround back
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 5
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If you select “Proceed”, YPAO takes the
measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
ERROR 6
Surround back speakers are
connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back
speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
ERROR 7
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again.
ERROR 8
The YPAO microphone cannot
detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error
occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
ERROR 9
Canceled by user operation
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To
cancel the measurement, select “Quit”.
ERROR 10
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha
dealer or service center.
ERROR 11
One of the rear presence
speakers cannot be detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.
En 66
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement
results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal
speaker settings.
Warning message Remedy
WARNING 1
A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the cable
connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message
may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case,
you can ignore the message.
WARNING 2
A speaker is placed more than
24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and move the speaker
identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening
position.
WARNING 3
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.
Select “Level” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the speaker
identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and
cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
En 67
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.68).
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
En 68
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73)
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.68)
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.69)
• Using other connection methods (p.70)
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.
– Network settings
– Bluetooth settings
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services
X
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Network”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
and select “OK”.
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
7
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
SETUP
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 69
8
After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
9
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
the Wi-Fi screen.
10
Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.
Y
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 70
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
and select “OK”.
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
7
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select the desired
connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.68).
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.71).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.71).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.72).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
SETUP
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
En 71
Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the security
method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 72
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 73
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
products, visit the Yamaha website.
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
room and play them back simultaneously.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.
Y
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
X
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
3
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
4
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
5
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the Wireless LAN
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.149) in the
“Setup” menu.
CONNECT
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
z
En 74
PLAYBACK
Basic playback procedure
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models) (p.83)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.86)
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.92)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
X
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.75).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• When the MAIN/ZONE switch on the remote control is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE4”,
pressing the HDMI OUT key can enable (OUT 3) or disable (OFF) the HDMI OUT3 jack
output.
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT 1+2
HDMI OUT Sel.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
MUTE
VOLUME
HDMI OUT
Input selection keys
En 75
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 8 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch
them depending on a playback source.
1
Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source
and settings registered to the corresponding scene are
directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it
is in standby mode.
Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by
pressing SCENE repeatedly.
The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.
2
To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.
Y
• To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.
• The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit
for the 30 seconds.
By default, the following input settings are registered for each scene.
X
• You can check the detailed settings of each scene from the “Scene Setting” screen
(p.142) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also register and recall SCENE 1-4 with the SCENE key on the unit’s front
panel.
Registering a scene
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
2
Hold down the desired numbered key (1-8) until “SET
Complete (Setting Complete)” appears on the front
display and on the TV.
X
• You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene Setting” in the “Setup”
menu. For details, see “Scene Setting” (p.142).
• You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For
details, see “Scene Rename” (p.142).
Main Zone, Zone2 and Zone3
SCENE
Input AV1 TUNER AUDIO2 NET RADIO
SCENE
Input AV2 AV3 AUDIO 1 SERVER
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Zone4
SCENE
Input AV1 AV2 AV3 AV4
SCENE
Input AV5 AV6 AV7 AV1
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
SET Complete
SCENE1
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
SCENE
En 76
Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
Enabling SURROUND:AI.
• Press AI.
This mode lets you enjoy the optimum surround effect according to AI
analysis as well as a compelling sense of realism (p.77).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies and music
• Press PROGRAM repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies and games, as well as for listening to
music sources or for stereo playback.
Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.81).
Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.81).
Enabling Pure Direct
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.82).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.82).
X
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“Sound” menu (p.136).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Information” screen in
the “Sound” menu (p.136).
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
BAN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
PURE DIRECT
En 77
Playing back with surround effects
optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI)
With SURROUND:AI, the AI incorporated in the DSP creates the optimal
surround effect for the scene of the content.
Scenes are instantaneously analyzed with a focus on sound elements
such as “dialogue”, “background music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound
effects” as well as optimized in real time to create a compelling sense of
realism.
1
Press AI.
Each time you press the key, SURROUND:AI is enabled or disabled.
Y
• When PURE DIRECT is enabled, SURROUND:AI is not available.
• When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the straight decode mode, PROGRAM key and the
surround decoders are not available.
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD
3
)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD
3
). It allows you to
easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in
your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
X
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence
speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds) (p.141).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front
presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.141).
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using
the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field (p.141).
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
CLASSICAL
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
FPL FPR
3
HD
SW1
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
BAN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
AI
En 78
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
Enhanced
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
En 79
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
STEREO
Y
CINEMA DSP HD
3
(p.77) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.80) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
9ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 80
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.
En 81
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
or disabled.
Y
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.81).
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.80) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
X
• We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.137).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.178).
1
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
Y
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround
processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
• The Neural:X decoder does not work with Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select “Auto” or “bDsur” for these signals.
STRAIGHT
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
Auto
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
bDsur
Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.
Neural:X
DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
†‡ Dsur
SUR. DECODE
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
En 82
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
Y
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Operating the Setup menu and “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.122) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
enabled or disabled.
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
–Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
–DSD audio
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.122) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
PURE DIRECT
L R
VOL.
Enhancer On
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
ENHANCER
SW1
Hi
-
Res
“ENHANCER” lights up
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
En 83
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio
stations.
Y
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending
on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
En 84
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
X
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
see “Video Out” (p.123).
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.93).
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.84) to
tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
Preset number
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
TUNING
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
En 85
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
X
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
Y
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
Y
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
PRESET
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 86
■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Listening to DAB radio (Australia,
U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia
models only)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
transmission method.
Y
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
X
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.49).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
OPTION
ENTER
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 87
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
perform an initial scan.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.
3
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.90).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.119) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
scan.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
Y
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
Press
[ENTER]
Init Scan
VOL.
>>>-------
30%
Init Scan
VOL.
BBC Radio 4
DAB
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
BBC Radio 4
DAB
Daily Service
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
BBC National
DAB 2
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
Secondary station
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
TUNING
ENTER
TUNER
En 88
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.87) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
station.
Y
“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select a preset DAB radio station to
be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset
Preset OK
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
Preset number
02:Empty
Preset
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
PRESET:01
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
TUNIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
MEMORY
OPTION
ENTER
PRESET
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 89
■ Clearing all preset DAB radio stations
Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
into a DAB radio station.
1
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
Program Type Station genre
Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Info
Program Type
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
Item name
Classic FM
Classic Music
DAB
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
Information
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
OPTION
ENTER
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 90
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
100 [best]).
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel
label.
6
To exit from the menu, press RETURN.
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
SW1
DAB channel label Reception strength
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 91
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency Channel label
174.928 MHz 5A
176.640 MHz 5B
178.352 MHz 5C
180.064 MHz 5D
181.936 MHz 6A
183.648 MHz 6B
185.360 MHz 6C
187.072 MHz 6D
188.928 MHz 7A
190.640 MHz 7B
192.352 MHz 7C
194.064 MHz 7D
195.936 MHz 8A
197.648 MHz 8B
199.360 MHz 8C
201.072 MHz 8D
202.928 MHz 9A
204.640 MHz 9B
206.352 MHz 9C
208.064 MHz 9D
209.936 MHz 10A
211.648 MHz 10B
213.360 MHz 10C
215.072 MHz 10D
216.928 MHz 11A
218.640 MHz 11B
220.352 MHz 11C
222.064 MHz 11D
223.936 MHz 12A
225.648 MHz 12B
227.360 MHz 12C
229.072 MHz 12D
230.784 MHz 13A
232.496 MHz 13B
234.208 MHz 13C
235.776 MHz 13D
237.488 MHz 13E
239.200 MHz 13F
Frequency Channel label
En 92
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
from registered radio stations.
Y
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
antennas.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the FM band.
3
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
X
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
see “Video Out” (p.123).
FM 87.50MHz
VOL.
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
TUNING
TUNER
En 93
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.85).
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.92) to
tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
X
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto
Preset function.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
X
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
Y
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press BAND to select the FM band
3
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
Y
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
Preset number
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
TUNIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BAND
MEMORY
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
PRESET
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 94
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
OPTION
ENTER
TUNER
Cursor keys
En 95
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The
unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
X
We recommend using “FM Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.93).
2
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears.
Y
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station
does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Info
Program Type
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
SW1
Item name
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
STEREO TUNED
SW1
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
En 96
Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
smartphones) on the unit.
Y
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.51).
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.182).
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
displayed on the TV.
X
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
BLUETOOTH
Playback operation
keys
En 97
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
ENTER
HELPRETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
USB
SILENT CINEMA
PROGRAM
5V
1A
(
CONNECT
)
The unit (front)
USB storage device
Connected
USB
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
En 98
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
X
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
hold down RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
USB
Cursor keys
En 99
■ Browse screen
a Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.100).
b Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
c Item number/total
d Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
■ Playback screen
a Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.100), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
a
c
d
b
a
b
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
Cursor keys
Playback operation
keys
En 100
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
BAN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 101
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your media servers on the unit.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.51). You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.146) in the
“Setup” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or media servers, first you need to configure the
media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other media server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
settings.
En 102
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
X
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically.
•You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
En 103
■ Browse screen
a Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.104).
b Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
c Item number/total
d Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
■ Playback screen
a Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.104), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, h, j, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
a
c
d
b
a
b
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
Cursor keys
Playback operation
keys
En 104
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 105
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Y
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.51). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
the unit in “Information” (p.146) in the “Network” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
Playback of Internet radio
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
playback screen is displayed.
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
•You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
En 106
■ Browse screen
a Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
b Item number/total
c Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
■ Playback screen
a Playback indicator
Displays the elapsed time.
b Playback information
Displays the station name, album name and song title.
X
• You can use the playback operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
b
c
a
a
b
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
BAN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
ENTER
Cursor keys
Playback operation
keys
En 107
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
screen.
X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.116).
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor key to select “Add to favorites” and press
ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
Browse screen
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 108
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Y
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.146) in
the “Setup” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
X
For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “AirPlay Volume Interlock” (p.148) in the “Network” menu to “Off”.
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
iTunes (example) iOS (example)
En 109
■ Playback screen
a Playback indicator
Displays the elapsed/remaining time.
b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
b
a
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
ROG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LUET
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
Playback operation
keys
En 110
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room
(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV: p.112
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.112
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.184).
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Guest room
(Zone2)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Video (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Video/audio (HDMI)
En 111
Preparing the multi zone system
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39).
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and
connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Y
(RX-A3080 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.150) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(3 MUSIC)
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
OPTICAL
43
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
VIDEO
FM
75ȍ
ANTENNA
DIO 4
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SURROUND
SURROUND
R
5
6
L R
AM
(R
SUB
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(F
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE
ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
En 112
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or
Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
(Zone4).
Y
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
unit with an HDMI cable (p.45).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu and “Option” menu cannot be used with Zone2 or Zone4, but browsing or play back are
possible with a network, USB or Bluetooth connection in Zone2.
To assign the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”
(p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
3
H
DMI
AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
R.PRESENCE
R
R RL L
R L
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONT
SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
(4
NET
)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI
3
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone4
Main zone
HDMI input
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
Zone2 or Zone4
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
En 113
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied
remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT
jacks.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
HDMI OUT
ARC
1
2 3
HDMI
(1 MOVIE) (5 STB) (6 GAME)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
V
IE)
(5 STB) (6 GAME)
A
XIAL
COAXIAL
FM
5
ȍ
ANTENNA
(
2 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 3/
R.PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACKSURROUND
R.PRESENCE
R
5
6
L R RL L
R L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
AM
PRE OUT
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER FRONTFRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(FRONT)
EXTRA SP2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
YPRPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
(5 STB)
B
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
A
(HDCP2.2)
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
En 114
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
1
Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
disabled.
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
indicator lights up in the front display.
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Y
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.184).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
“SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models) (p.83)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.86)
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.92)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)
Y
AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in
the main zone.
X
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone3/Zone3 input.
• To play back DSD audio or signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or
384 kHz in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the party
mode (p.115).
• Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.154) setting in the “System” menu, the
PROGRAM key may be also available in Zone2.
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
BAN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
ME
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
ZON
S
L
E
EP
MAIN/ZONE
z
Input selection keys
En 115
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
The following functions are also available when the zone you want to
operate is enabled.
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE 1-8.
X
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
down the desired SCENE1-8 key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
(Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Press ENHANCER.
X
Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.154) setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also
available in Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that
is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
display.
X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.152)
in the “Setup” menu.
Y
Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
ENHANCER
MUTE
VOLUME
SCENE
SLEEP
PARTY
En 116
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
shortcut numbers.
X
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.107).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
X
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
2
Press PRESET to select a desired content.
Y
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73) on your mobile device.
01:Empty
Memory Preset
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
Shortcut number (flashes)
02:Empty
Memory Preset
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
01:USB
Recall Preset
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
MEMORY
PRESET
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
En 117
Viewing the current status
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently selected) on the front panel
display or TV.
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items.
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears.
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately
to each input source group.
*1
AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
*2
The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is
activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Audio Decoder
Info
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
Item name
†‡ Dsur
AV1
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
Information
Currently input
source
Item
AV 1-7
AUX
AUDIO 1-4
*1
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
)
TUNER (FM/AM)
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models)
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
)
* (U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data
System broadcasting station (p.95).
TUNER (DAB)
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.89) for details.
Bluetooth
USB
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
)
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet
MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program
(sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name
*2
), IP Address
(IP address), Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
En 118
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information”
and press ENTER.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
X
When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the status information for SURROUND:AI is also
displayed.
3
To close the information display, press RETURN.
Y
• You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status
information on the TV. For details, see “PROGRAM Key” (p.154).
• Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup”
menu on the TV.
Input source/
Party mode status
Audio format
CINEMA DSP/
ENHANCER status
Decoder
Sound mode
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
PROGRAM
RETURN
OPTION
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 119
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the currently
selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Tone Control
Option
SW
SBL SBR
SL SR
CL R
VOL.
SW1
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.
120
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 120
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
121
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 121
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
121
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 121
Lipsync
(Lipsync)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 121
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 122
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
122
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In. Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 122
Subwoofer Trim
(SW. Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 122
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 122
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio signal to be played back. 123
En 120
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
Y
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings
X
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “YPAO” have been already saved (p.55).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Video Mode
(V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
123
Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 123
Video Out
(Video Out)
Video Out
(V. Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio
source.
123
Shuffle / Repeat
(Shuffle/Repeat)
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configure the shuffle setting for playback. -
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configure the repeat setting for playback. -
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
FM Mode
(Mode)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio. 124
Preset
(Preset)
FM Auto Preset
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
124
Clear Preset
(Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers. 124
Clear All Preset
(ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset
numbers.
124
Add to favorites
(Add to Fav.)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to
the“Favorites” folder.
124
Remove from favorites
(RemovefromFav.)
Removes it from the “Favorites” folder. 124
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
87
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
90
On-screen Information
(On-screen Info)
Displays the current status information. 124
Item Function Page
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
En 121
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
volume.
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
X
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0
to 6
X
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.77) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms
to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
Ideal position
En 122
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).
X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
–DSD audio
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Configures the input settings.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.
Settings
Off
(Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
(On)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
En 123
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Selects the audio signal to be played back.
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
source.
Settings
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
in “Resolution” and “Aspect” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode (V.M)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
settings configured in “Processing” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.144)
in the “Setup” menu.
X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
1
to 6
■ Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ Shuffle / Repeat (Shuffle/Repeat)
Configures the Shuffle settings or repeat settings.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).
Settings
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).
Settings
Auto
(Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
COAX/OPT
(COAX/OPT)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
Direct
(Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Off (Off) Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Off
(Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.
Off
(Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.
En 124
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.
FM Mode (Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
■ Preset (Preset)
Registers radio stations or clears preset stations.
FM Auto Preset (FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets.
X
• You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
• (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “FM Auto Preset”.
Clear Preset (Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Clear All Preset (ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Settings
■ Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)
Register the currently playing Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.
X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input source as shortcuts (p.116).
■ Remove from favorites (RemovefromFav.)
Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.
■ Init Scan (Init Scan)
Initiate Scan specifies the initial settings in order to receive DAB radio. If this operation is not
performed, not all DAB-related functions can be used.
■ Tune AID (Tune AID)
From the “Tune Aid” menu , you can check the reception level of each channel.
■ On-screen Information (On-screen Info)
Displays the current status information.
Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Monaural (Monaural) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
Cancel Cancels the unregistering of a radio station.
Execute Removes all registered radio stations.
En 125
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure the
unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.
X
• If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears at the lower of the “Setup” menu.
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
5
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
En 126
Setup menu items
Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 131
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 131
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 131
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 132
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 132
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 133
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 133
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 133
Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. 133
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 134
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 134
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 134
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 134
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 135
YPAO Result Checks and Reloads the previous YPAO adjustments. 135
En 127
Sound
Information Displays information about the current audio signal. 136
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu. 136
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 136
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 137
DSP Parameter
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. 137
Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 137
Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. 137
Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. 137
Reverb Time Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 137
Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 138
Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 138
Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. 138
Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. 138
Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. 138
Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. 138
Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. 138
Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. 139
Surround Decoder
Decode Type Selects a surround decoder to be used. 139
Center Spread Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. 139
Center Image Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 139
9ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. 139
Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. 139
Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. 139
Height Balance Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. 139
Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. 140
Reset Restores all default settings. 140
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 140
Volume
Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volume. 140
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 140
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 140
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted. 140
Virtual Speaker
VPS Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 141
VSBS Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 141
Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (RX-A3080 only) Enables/disables the jitter elimination function. 141
DAC Digital Filter (RX-A3080 only) Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter). 141
Balance Input Attenuator (RX-A3080 only) Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion. 141
Menu Item Function Page
En 128
Scene
Scene Setting Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. 142
Scene Rename Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen. 142
Video/HDMI
Information Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. 143
Video Mode
Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing. 143
Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals. 143
Aspect Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals. 143
Adjustment Configures the video adjustments. 144
HDMI Control
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 145
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 145
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 145
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 145
HDMI Audio Output Enables/disables the audio output from a TV. 145
HDMI ZONE OUT Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 145
HDCP Version Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks. 146
HDMI Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 146
Network
Information Displays the network information on the unit. 146
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 147
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 147
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 147
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 148
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 148
AirPlay Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. 148
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 149
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other
devices of the network.
149
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 149
Audio Receive
Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 150
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 150
Menu Item Function Page
En 129
Multi Zone
Information Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 150
Zone2
Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 150
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes. 151
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 151
Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2. 151
Monaural Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 151
Enhancer Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output. 151
Tone Control Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output. 151
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. 151
Left / Right Balance Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output. 151
Zone3
Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone3 output. 150
Max Volume Sets the Zone3 limit value of the volumes. 151
Initial Volume Sets the Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 151
Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone3. 151
Monaural Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone3 output. 151
Enhancer Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone3 output. 151
Tone Control Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone3 output. 151
Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone3 output. 151
Left / Right Balance Adjusts the volume balance for Zone3 output. 151
Zone Rename Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen. 152
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 152
Menu Item Function Page
En 130
System
Information Displays the system information on the unit. 152
Language Selects an on-screen menu language. 152
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 153
Input Skip Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key. 153
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 153
Auto Play Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet radio services. 154
DSP Skip Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key. 154
Remote Key
PROGRAM Key Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control. 154
Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. 155
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 155
Volume Switches the scale of the volume display. 155
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 155
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen. 155
Trigger Output1
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack to function. 156
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack functions are synchronized. 156
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack to function. 156
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack functions are synchronized. 156
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 157
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 157
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 157
Firmware Update Updates the firmware via the network. 158
Menu Item Function Page
En 131
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
X
Default settings are underlined.
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
• Measurement results (YPAO)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
•Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1
, Pattern2
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the center of the diagram on the right side of the screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
Pattern1 ▶ 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Basic
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
7.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).
7.2.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
7.2 +2Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2.4 [ext.RP]
(RX-A3080 only)
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
7.2.4 [ext.Front]
(RX-A3080 only)
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]
(RX-A3080 only)
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
En 132
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
X
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover”. Frequency sounds lower than the
specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output from the corresponding speakers.
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2 Bi-Amp
Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
(RX-A3080 only)
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers,
and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37).
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP]
(RX-A3080 only)
Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
En 133
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes and layout.
Settings
Layout Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size and layout.
Settings
Layout Settings
X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Layout Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.
Large
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Rear Height
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.
Overhead Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.
En 134
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
and its phase.
Settings
X
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Layout settings
X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00
m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
X
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “YPAO”
have already been saved (p.55). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.
Monaural x2
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
En 135
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “YPAO” (p.55) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer).
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain, use the cursor keys to select
an item.
Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected band.
Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band.
Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
■ YPAO Result
You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, “Level”, “Angle
(horizontal)” and “Height”) in “YPAO Result”.
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can discard the
manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
1
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload”.
2
Press ENTER.
3
Press SETUP.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
En 136
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Information
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Choices
X
Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
(When DTS:X content is played back)
For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for
overhead speaker channels”.
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
En 137
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.
Setting range
0
ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
X
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and
fine adjustment.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.
■ DSP Parameter
Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
1 ms to 99 ms
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Reverb Time
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant sound
and lower to have clear sound.
Setting range
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En 138
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to
enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and
lower to weaken it.
Setting range
0 % to 100 %
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Back Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Back Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En 139
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
■ Surround Decoder
Configures the surround decoders settings.
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used.
Choices
Auto
, bDsur, Neural:X, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2channel source
is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.
Settings
X
If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.
Center Image
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this higher to
strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken it (more
broadening effect).This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
■ 9ch Stereo
Adjusting the volume settings.
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
-5 to 0
to 5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to
enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
-5 to 0
to 5
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to
enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
-5 to 0
to 5
Height Balance
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance the upside,
and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 5
to 10
X
The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.
Off Disables Center Spread.
On Enables Center Spread.
En 140
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is
selected.
Settings
Reset
Restores all default settings.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
signals) playback.
Settings
■ Volume
Setting the volume.
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.82).
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Off
Disables monaural sound output.
On Enables monaural sound output.
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
En 141
■ Virtual Speaker
Setting Virtual Speaker.
VPS
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers (p.77).
Settings
X
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
VSBS
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
Settings
X
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
(RX-A3080 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Input source
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network sources),
Bluetooth, USB
Settings
■ DAC Digital Filter
(RX-A3080 only)
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
sounds.
Settings
■ Balance Input Attenuator
(RX-A3080 only)
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.47).
Input source
AUDIO 4
Settings
Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Off Disables the jitter elimination function.
Level 1
, Level 2, Level 3
Enables the jitter elimination function.
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.
Sharp Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Slow Roll-off Type
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Short Latency Type
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
Bypass
Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB) Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).
En 142
Scene
Configures the scene settings.
■ Scene Setting
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.
X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device, Bluetooth
device, and network device.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.
2
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Choices
*1 The “Volume” setting is not available with Zone4.
X
To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset”.
■ Scene Rename
Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, Press SETUP.
HDMI Control Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.145))
Input Input (p.74), Audio Select (p.123)
Registerd Content
[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB]
Station, Music Content
[Input sources: others]
---
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.74)
Mode
DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.140), Enhancer (p.151), Hi-Res Mode
(p.122), SURROUND:AI (p.77)
Sound
Tone Control (p.120), YPAO Volume (p.120), Adaptive DRC (p.121),
Extra Bass (p.122)
Surround Dialogue Lift (p.121), Dialogue Level (p.121), Subwoofer Trim (p.122)
Video Video Mode (p.143), Video Adjustment (p.123)
Volume Master Volume (p.74)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.121), Delay (p.136)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.131), Parametric EQ (p.134)
Zone Interlock Power (p.114), Input (p.150), Volume (p.150) *1
En 143
Video/HDMI
Configures the video/HDMI settings.
■ Information
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT
jacks.
Choices
■ Video Mode
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Settings
X
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.160) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
X
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
HDMI Monitor
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
Direct
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
En 144
Adjustment
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
X
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the ENTER to select a preset number.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0
to 50
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0
to 50
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
Saturation
Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0
to +100
En 145
■ HDMI Control
Configures the HDMI control settings.
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.184).
Settings
Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.184) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.186) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ HDMI Audio Output
Selects whether the HDMI sound is output from the TV speakers.
X
The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2, HDMI ZONE OUT
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, HDMI OUT 2
jack or HDMI ZONE OUT.
Settings
Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ HDMI ZONE OUT Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Zone2, Zone4
X
For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.184).
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
En 146
■ HDCP Version
Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.
Input sources
AV 1-7
Settings
■ HDMI Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
stand by mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys to
select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit
blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
Choices
Auto
Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.
1.4 Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address
(Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
MusicCast Network The status of the MusicCast network connection.
Wired/Wireless (Wi-Fi) The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
En 147
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
IP Address
Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
manually.
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
5
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
6
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
Settings
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.51).
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.68).
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
En 148
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
X
AirPlay (p.108) and DMC (p.148) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital Media
Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows
Media Player 12) on the same network.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
■ AirPlay Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off” is set,
you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.
Interlock
Settings
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone
Limited
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
En 149
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Network Name
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename .
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Settings
Bluetooth
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.96).
Settings
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
Off Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
En 150
■ Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone) and
the unit.
■ Procedure
1
Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.
X
This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.147) is set to “Off”.
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Information
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Choices
■ Zone2, Zone3 Set
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.131).
Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
On/Off Displays the status of each zone.
Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Volume The volume setting for Zone2 and Zone3.
Tone Control The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2 and Zone3.
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
En 151
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.
Setting range
0
ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Settings
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or
Zone3 output.
Settings
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Settings
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Setting range
-20 to 0
to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments) [0.5 to
97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Off Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On Enables Extra Bass.
En 152
■ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select Zone, and then press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.115) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
X
When party mode is being used, the Disable/Enable setting cannot be changed.
System
Configures the system settings.
■ Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
Choices
■
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
English
, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting
TV Format The unit’s video signal type
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit
Tuner Frequency Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
En 153
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Input Assignment
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “
AV 2
” and “
OPTICAL
”, and press
ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Input Skip
Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key or AV CONTROLLER. You
can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.
X
When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
■ Input Rename (Auto)
Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display.You can select a
name created by the Auto Rename function.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-3
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.
3
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.
4
Press SETUP.
X
• When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset to
the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” and then back to “Auto”.
• “Auto” can be selected for AUDIO 1-3 only if a digital “Input Assignment” setting is selected.
Off Does not skip the selected input source.
On Skips the selected input source.
En 154
■ Input Rename (Manual)
Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
2
Press ENTER.
The cursor moves to the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
• To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.
• If you select “RESET”, the default input name will be inserted into the editing area.
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
Press SETUP.
■ Auto Play
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input
sources.
Input sources
(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Y
In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.
X
With some input sources, “Auto” cannot be selected.
■ DSP Skip
Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.You can select the
desired sound program quickly by using this function.
Settings
■ Remote Key
Configures the Remote Key settings.
PROGRAM Key
Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can use the
PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.
Settings
X
This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.
Off Disables Auto Play function.
On
Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.
Auto
Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back at
setting the unit to standby mode.
Off Does not skip the selected sound program.
On Skips the selected sound program.
Assign 1
Enables selecting the DSP Programs.
Assign 2
Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs.
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music Programs
Assign 3 Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.
Assign 4 Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.
Assign 5 Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Assign 6 Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.
Assign 7
Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle
Assign 8
Displays the front/on-screen display information.
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information
En 155
Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.
Settings
Y
• For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see “HDMI Control” (p.145)
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control
compatible devices (p.184).
• HDMI Control might not work properly.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
Y
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.157) is set to “On”.
Volume
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Settings
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
Default
Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
TV Control
Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.
RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)
GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)
YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)
BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0 to 97).
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
En 156
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
switching.
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
Zone3
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
Zone4
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
En 157
■ ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
Settings
Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Memory Guard
Settings
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
5 minutes, 20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit
has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
En 158
■ Firmware Update
Displays information about the firmware update.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and system ID.
Choices
X
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may
not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, wait a while before
updating the firmware again, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the
USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)” (p.162).
USB Update
Perform a firmware update using a USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu.
X
For information about updating the firmware using a USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM.
UPDATE)” (p.162) in “Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)”.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
Firmware Version Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
System ID Displays the system ID number.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
En 159
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
X
Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
connected.
Settings
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 5 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 5 seconds.
X
If the remote control ID does not match that of the unit, “RemID Mismatch” appears on the unit’s front
display when the remote control is operated.
Item Function Page
SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 159
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 159
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 159
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
160
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 160
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 160
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 161
DTS MODE Switches the DTS format notification setting. 161
BACKUP/RESTORE
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.
161
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 162
FIRM. UPDATE Updates the firmware. 162
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 162
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
8¬MIN
SPEAKER¡IMP.
ON Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
ON
REMOTE SENSOR
ID1
REMOTE ID
En 160
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.143)
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
TUNER FRQ STEP
NTSC
TV FORMAT
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
YES
MONITOR CHECK
En 161
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
Format
Y
When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet.
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
unit supports.
Settings
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)
Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB memory
device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.
Choices
■ Backup/rstore procedure
1
Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front panel.
2
To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BACKUP” or “RESTORE” and then press INFO
on the front panel.
3
Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the front display.
X
To cancel the operation, press STRAIGHT.
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1 MODE 2
8 bit 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit
4K/60, 50 Hz
RGB 4:4:4 ,- -
YCbCr 4:4:4 ,- -
YCbCr 4:2:2 ,-
YCbCr 4:2:0 ,,-
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
RGB 4:4:4 ,,-
YCbCr 4:4:4 ,,-
YCbCr 4:2:2 ,,
MODE 1
4K MODE
MODE 1
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
MODE 2
Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly output
a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the USB memory device.
RESTORE
Restores the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has
been created).
MODE 1
DTS MODE
BACKUP
BACKUP/RESTORE
En 162
4
When “Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press z (power) to set the unit to
standby mode and turn it on again.
If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the process again.
In case of “BACKUP”:
• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the file in
different folder.
• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the root of the USB
memory device.
In case of “RESTORE”:
• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.
Y
• “RESTORE” is effective after backuping all the settings.
• Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be
restored correctly.
• The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after SETUP is
pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.163).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
X
• You can also check the firmware version in “Information” (p.143) in the “System” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
USB
FIRM. UPDATE
x.xx
VERSION
En 163
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
X
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware
update is available via the network.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
SETUP” menu (p.162).
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
SETUP is pressed.
Updating the unit’s firmware
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
X
• If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
• You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the
front display depending on the condition of the network connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, select “LATER” in step 2, and then
follow the on-screen instructions. When a screen to confirm the firmware update
appears after turning off the unit, press ENTER to start the firmware update.
When the firmware update is complete, the unit enters standby mode automatically.
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions.
– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.
– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two
minutes pass after the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.
– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.
– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit
with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
TUNINGBANDTUNING
MEMORY
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
AI
PROGRAM
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
TOP
MENU
BLUE
YELLOW
GREENRED
PRESET
BLUETOOTH
NET USBTUNER
INPUT
8765
4321
SCENE
HDMI OUTPURE DIRECT
PARTY
MAIN 2 3 4
ZONE
SLEEP
TUNIN
G
B
AN
D
TUNIN
G
M
EM
O
RY
S
TRAI
G
HT
V
O
L
U
M
E
E
NHAN
C
E
R
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
AI
PR
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-
U
P
/
/MENU
HOM
E
T
O
P
MENU
B
L
U
E
Y
E
L
L
O
W
G
R
E
E
N
R
E
D
P
R
E
S
E
T
B
LU
E
T
OO
T
H
N
E
T
U
S
B
T
UN
E
R
I
N
PUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SC
ENE
HD
M
I
O
U
T
PU
R
E
D
IR
E
C
T
P
A
R
T
Y
T
T
MA
I
N
2
3
4
ZO
NE
S
L
E
EP
RETURN
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 164
APPENDIX
Additional Features
The following features were added for product improvements.
Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled
speakers/headphones
You can output audio played back from the unit on connected Bluetooth speakers or
headphones.
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth
speakers/headphones and the unit.
1
Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an input source.
Select an input source other than Bluetooth.
The audio transmission function does not work when Bluetooth is selected as the input
source.
2
Press SETUP on the remote control to display the menu.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” → “Bluetooth” → “Audio
Send”, and then set “Transmitter” to “On”.
4
Select “Device Search” to search the Bluetooth devices.
The list of available Bluetooth devices is displayed.
5
Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with the unit.
Y
If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing mode
and then select “Device Search”.
When the connection process finishes, Bluetooth indicator lights up in the front display.
Y
• A Bluetooth device with the pass key other than “0000” cannot be connected to the unit.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth
device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• Terminate a Bluetooth connection with any of the following operations.
– Terminate the connection from the Bluetooth device.
– Set “Transmitter” in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• For details on compatible Bluetooth devices, refer to the manual for this unit.
Notice
Audio transmitted via Bluetooth may be delayed. In addition, sound field effects selected on the unit are
not applied.
The unit
Bluetooth speakers/headphones
Notice
• The following audio cannot be transmitted.
– AirPlay and DSD audio
– PCM audio exceeding 192 kHz
– Super Audio CD (SACD) and DVD-Audio
– Audio from radio and external devices connected to this unit, playing back with Pure Direct or Direct
enabled
• When connected to a Bluetooth device that does not support copyright protection technology
(SCMS-T), some content may not be played back.
• Played back audio will also be output from speakers connected to the unit.
• Audio from a Bluetooth device (smartphone, etc.) cannot be played back.
En 165
Bluetooth transmission operations
• Function for transmitting to Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)
• Supported profiles
–A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codecs
–SBC
• Capable of play/stop operation from Bluetooth device (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)
En 166
Using wireless surround speakers
(MusicCast Surround function)
Using devices that support the MusicCast Surround function, you can enjoy a 5.1.2-channel or
5.1-channel theater system with wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
■ Devices supporting MusicCast Surround
■ Sample speaker layout
For a 5.1.2-channel system using two MusicCast 20 speakers and one MusicCast SUB 100.
Y
• In a 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, the surround speakers and subwoofer can be wireless. With other
systems, only the subwoofer can be wireless.
• With wireless surround speakers
– Sound will not be output from the speaker terminals (SURROUND) and pre-out jacks (SURROUND) on the
main unit.
– Surround back speakers and rear presence speakers cannot be used.
• With a wireless subwoofer
–One subwoofer can be wireless.
– Sound will not be output from the pre-out jacks (SUBWOOFER or SUBWOOFER 1 and 2) on the main unit.
Therefore, another subwoofer cannot be used by connecting it with an audio cable.
• The following audio cannot be output from the wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
– Signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or 384kHz
–DSD audio
– DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD) from HDMI input
1
This unit and the devices supporting MusicCast Surround must be registered
with the same location on the MusicCast CONTROLLER app.
2
Follow the app’s on-screen instructions to complete setup of the MusicCast
Surround function.
For detailed setup instructions, refer to the following.
https://download.yamaha.com/files/tcm:39-1212383
3
Adjust the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).
Y
• For details on YPAO, refer to the manual for this unit.
• Multi measurement and angle/height measurement cannot be used.
4
Check the settings, and then enjoy content playback.
As of October 31, 2018
Wireless streaming speakers Network subwoofer
MusicCast 50 MusicCast 20 MusicCast SUB 100
4
1
2
9
5
3
ER
Tap the settings
icon.
Tap “MusicCast
Surround/Stereo”.
En 167
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “YPAO” to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.55). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.131).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.140). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.151).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.140). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.151).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
“Option” menu (p.122).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.184). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.157).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.159).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “HDMI Standby Through” (p.146) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can
also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
En 168
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1
The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
2
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
3
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power
supply voltage.
Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.157).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.159).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power
supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
outlet and plug it again.)
En 169
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.159).
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote
control do not operate
The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the
operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote
control have been changed.
Set “Color Key” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “Default”.
HDMI control setting is “Off”. Set “HDMI Control” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 170
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.140).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.135).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker
settings (p.132).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume
(p.134).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.135).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to
“Use” (p.134).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.
TV audio is selected as the input source. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
En 171
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.42).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.145).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
No sound is coming from the Zone assigned with
“HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”.
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled. Set “HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136). If necessary, change the
digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
(p.112).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 172
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.160).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video/HDMI”
in the “Setup” menu (p.143). For information about video signals supported by the unit,
see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.186).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2/2.3-compatible devices, both the
TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2/2.3.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.74).
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
(p.112).
En 173
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Monaural” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.124).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or
other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.84).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.84).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.87).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
not provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
En 174
Bluetooth
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.149).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.96).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.96).
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.96).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En 175
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.147). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.147).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless
router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.101).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
En 176
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off. Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.162).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 177
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.101).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.51).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.159).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Update failed. Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 178
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
Audio information (audio decoding format)
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Enabled Speaker
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
technology.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Dialog Control
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
En 179
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
channels of surround sound.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
En 180
Audio Information (Others)
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En 181
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
wireless home network.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
CINEMA DSP HD
3
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD
3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
SURROUND:AI
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes scenes by focusing on sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background
music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as instantaneously creates the optimal surround effect in real
time. An expressive power beyond conventional single sound field effects maximizes the realistic feel.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En 182
Supported devices and file formats
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
Supported devices
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■ USB devices
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect any other type of USB devices.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
storage device.
■ AirPlay
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
recording device or consult file’s help.
■ USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.
Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
files on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• When the sampling frequency is 352.8 kHz, playback is downsampled to 176.4 kHz; when the sampling
frequency is 384 kHz, playback is downsampled to 192 kHz.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, playback at 352.8 and 384 kHz is not downsampled. In addition, when Pure Direct
is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered.
File
Sampling frequency
(kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32 - 2 ,
MP3 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
WMA 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24 - 2 ,
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 - 2 ,
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32 - 2 ,
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz/
11.2 MHz
1 - 2 -
En 183
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
to a TV as shown below.
HDMI HDMI HDMIHDMI
VIDEOVIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
VIDEO in
Video conversion table
X
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
m: Available
* If “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” is set to “Zone2”, conversion to 4K is possible only from 1080p. All other resolutions are pass-through.
HDMI out
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K
HDMI in
480i/576i
mm (*) m (*) m (*) m (*) m (*)
480p/576p
mm (*) m (*) m (*) m (*)
720p
mm (*) m (*) m (*)
1080i
m (*) mm (*) m (*)
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m (*) m (*) mm
1080p/24 Hz
mm
4K
m
COMPONENT VIDEO in
480i/576i
mm (*) m (*) m (*) m (*) m (*)
480p/576p
mm (*) m (*) m (*) m (*)
720p
mm (*) m (*) m (*)
1080i
m (*) mm (*) m (*)
VIDEO in
480i/576i
mm (*) m (*) m (*) m (*) m (*)
En 184
Multi-zone output
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
(HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
selected in the main zone is selected)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the
party mode (p.115).
*8 If the Main Zone and Zone4 share the same input, the audio format that can be received in
the Main Zone is restricted by the device connected to Zone4.
Information on HDMI
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control external devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
•Standby
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback and menu
operations)
• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in the
“Setup” menu
• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote control
when “TV Control” is set for the color keys
Using the unit’s internal
amplifier (p.39)
Using an external amplifier (p.111)
In \ Out
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4) m (*5, 8)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6)
Analog audio (AUDIO) mmmmm
USB (*7) mmmmm
Network sources (*7) mmmmm
TUNER mmmmm
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
En 185
(Example)
Y
HDMI Control might not work properly. For related functions and settings, refer to the following.
– For linking with the selected scene, see “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE)” (p.75).
– For setting the jack for TV audio input, see “TV Audio Input” (p.145).
– For setting the functions of the color keys, see “Color Key” (p.155).
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Y
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2
Press SETUP.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Video/HDMI”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
6
Press SETUP.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE 1
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 186
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
Y
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.44).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.75), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 7. (The settings must
be changed only when SCENE 7 is used as the default (TV Viewing).)
HDMI signal compatibility
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.
En 187
Trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple, AirPlay, Apple TV, Apple Watch, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone,
Lightning, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
App Store
SM
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are certification
marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and WPA2 are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
This product uses the following fonts.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans Version 1.004.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version1.1.
This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(https://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
Licenses
For information on the licenses of the third-party software in this
product, refer to the following.
http://(IP address of this product*)/licenses.html
* IP address of this product is checked with MusicCast
CONTROLLER.
En 188
Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-A3080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
[RX-A2080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 7 (AV 1-7)
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE]
– Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monaural x 2)
–Headphone x 1
[RX-A3080]
– Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4)
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3
– Pre Out (Balance) x 2 (FRONT) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
[RX-A2080]
– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R)
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
•HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 3 (HDMI OUT 1-3 *5)
*5 HDMI OUT 3 is a jack dedicated to zone out.
Other jacks
•YPAO MIC x 1
•REMOTE IN x 1
•REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
HDMI
•HDMI Features
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit)
–3D Video
– ARC (Audio Return Channel)
–HDMI Control (CEC)
–Auto Lip Sync
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio
– Deep Color
– x.v.Color
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
– HD audio playback
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
–HDMI Zone Output
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
–VGA
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Supported Audio Formats
–Dolby Atmos
–DTS:X
–Dolby TrueHD
–Dolby Digital Plus
–Dolby Digital
– DTS-HD Master Audio
–DTS-HD High Resolution
–DTS Express
–DTS
– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2/2.3 compatible)
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
[U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
En 189
Bluetooth
•Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version.................................................................... Ver. 4.2
• Supported Profile
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
Network
• PC Client Function
•AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4/5 GHz
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac*
* 20 MHz channel bandwidth only
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
–Dolby Atmos
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
–Dolby Digital
–DTS:X
– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
–DTS Digital Surround
•Post Decoding Format
– Dolby Surround
–Neural:X
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W
Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 150 W+150 W
Center...................................................................................... 150 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 150 W+150 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 150 W+150 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 150 W+150 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W
Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W
[RX-A2080]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
Center ......................................................................................150 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W
Center ......................................................................................140 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................155 W+155 W
Center ......................................................................................155 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 200 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 185 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch
En 190
[RX-A2080]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch
[RX-A2080]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch
Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch
Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch
•Dynamic Power (IHF)
[RX-A3080]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................175/220/295/410 W
[RX-A2080]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................165/210/285/405 W
•Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ........................................................ 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ...................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)......................................................... 45 mV
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................................... 2.4 V
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz).......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
ZONE OUT ......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level
PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ................................................................... 2.0 V
• Headphone Impedance..................................................16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)............................................. +0/-3 dB
•RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz).......................................................0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[RX-A3080]
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less
[RX-A2080]
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO.......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out................................................................... 150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
•Volume Control
Main Zone ............................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..............................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)...............................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type...................................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM
•Video Signal Level
Composite ........................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
En 191
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
.........................................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............. 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models]............................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Monaural.......................................................................3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................. 69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input.......................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
...................................................................530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models].................................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range...................................... 174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Support Audio Format .............. MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
• Antenna.................................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced
General
•Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Brazil and Central and South America models]
.................................................. AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Taiwan model]............................................AC110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model]................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
..................................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off .................................................................. 1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired ........................................................................................ 1.4 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ........................................................................ 1.7 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On .............. 1.5 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wi-Fi), Bluetooth Standby On ................................................... 2.5 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
..........................................................................................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
.................................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
...............................435 x 269 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 10-5/8” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight
[RX-A3080]
[China, Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
[Other models]...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)
[RX-A2080] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
Manual Development Group
© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 07/2019 AM-D0
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
https://download.yamaha.com/
AV17-0221
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
Yamaha RX-A3080 de handleiding
- Categorie
- Auto media-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-A3080 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-A3080 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha RX-A3080 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha RX-A3080 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha RX-A3080 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-A3080 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha RX-A3080 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-A3080 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-A3080 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-A3080 El kitabı
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha RX-A870 de handleiding
-
Yamaha MCR-N570D Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-AS710 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A670BL Gebruikershandleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1070 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V781 de handleiding
-
Yamaha CX-A5100 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V683 Snelstartgids
-
Yamaha RX-A4A Gebruikershandleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A6A Gebruikershandleiding